Hypertext-Literatur A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Aders, A. & Ansel, B. (1990). Hypertext für den Unterricht - eine kritsche Standortbestimmung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 235-248). Berlin: Springer. Aigner, H.J. & Dittrich, G. (1990). SmallTextHot. Die Entwicklung eines Hypertext-Systems in Smalltalk zur Gestaltung von Online-Benutzerdokumentationen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung. (S. 53-64). Berlin: Springer. Akscyn, R.M., McCracken, D.L. & Yoder, E.A. (1988). KMS: A distributed hypermedia system for managing knowledge in organisations. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 820-835. Allison, L. & Hammond, N. (1989). A learning support environment: The hitch-hikers guide. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 62-74). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Baird, P., MacMorrow, N. & Hardman, L. (1988). Cognitive aspects of constructing nonlinear documents: HyperCard and Glasgow Online. In Proceedings of the 12th International Online Information Meeting, December 6-8, 1988, London (pp. 207-218). Baird, P. & Percival, M. (1989). Glasgow Online: Database development using Apples HyperCard. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 75-92). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Ballstaedt, S.-P., Mandl, H., Schnotz, W. & Tergan, S.-O. (1981). Texte verstehen, Texte gestalten. München: Urban & Schwarzenberg. Bannon, C.J. (1991). The Perseus project. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 480-487). New York: McGraw Hill. Bechtel, B.L. (1992). Inside Macintosh as hypertext. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 312-323). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung] Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Aders, A. & Ansel, B. (1990). Hypertext für den Unterricht - eine kritsche Standortbestimmung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 235-248). Berlin: Springer. Aigner, H.J. & Dittrich, G. (1990). SmallTextHot. Die Entwicklung eines Hypertext-Systems in Smalltalk zur Gestaltung von Online-Benutzerdokumentationen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung. (S. 53-64). Berlin: Springer. Akscyn, R.M., McCracken, D.L. & Yoder, E.A. (1988). KMS: A distributed hypermedia system for managing knowledge in organisations. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 820-835. Allison, L. & Hammond, N. (1989). A learning support environment: The hitch-hikers guide. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 62-74). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Baird, P., MacMorrow, N. & Hardman, L. (1988). Cognitive aspects of constructing nonlinear documents: HyperCard and Glasgow Online. In Proceedings of the 12th International Online Information Meeting, December 6-8, 1988, London (pp. 207-218). Baird, P. & Percival, M. (1989). Glasgow Online: Database development using Apples HyperCard. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 75-92). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Ballstaedt, S.-P., Mandl, H., Schnotz, W. & Tergan, S.-O. (1981). Texte verstehen, Texte gestalten. München: Urban & Schwarzenberg. Bannon, C.J. (1991). The Perseus project. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 480-487). New York: McGraw Hill. Bechtel, B.L. (1992). Inside Macintosh as hypertext. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 312-323). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung] Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Aigner, H.J. & Dittrich, G. (1990). SmallTextHot. Die Entwicklung eines Hypertext-Systems in Smalltalk zur Gestaltung von Online-Benutzerdokumentationen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung. (S. 53-64). Berlin: Springer. Akscyn, R.M., McCracken, D.L. & Yoder, E.A. (1988). KMS: A distributed hypermedia system for managing knowledge in organisations. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 820-835. Allison, L. & Hammond, N. (1989). A learning support environment: The hitch-hikers guide. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 62-74). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Baird, P., MacMorrow, N. & Hardman, L. (1988). Cognitive aspects of constructing nonlinear documents: HyperCard and Glasgow Online. In Proceedings of the 12th International Online Information Meeting, December 6-8, 1988, London (pp. 207-218). Baird, P. & Percival, M. (1989). Glasgow Online: Database development using Apples HyperCard. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 75-92). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Ballstaedt, S.-P., Mandl, H., Schnotz, W. & Tergan, S.-O. (1981). Texte verstehen, Texte gestalten. München: Urban & Schwarzenberg. Bannon, C.J. (1991). The Perseus project. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 480-487). New York: McGraw Hill. Bechtel, B.L. (1992). Inside Macintosh as hypertext. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 312-323). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung] Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Akscyn, R.M., McCracken, D.L. & Yoder, E.A. (1988). KMS: A distributed hypermedia system for managing knowledge in organisations. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 820-835. Allison, L. & Hammond, N. (1989). A learning support environment: The hitch-hikers guide. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 62-74). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Baird, P., MacMorrow, N. & Hardman, L. (1988). Cognitive aspects of constructing nonlinear documents: HyperCard and Glasgow Online. In Proceedings of the 12th International Online Information Meeting, December 6-8, 1988, London (pp. 207-218). Baird, P. & Percival, M. (1989). Glasgow Online: Database development using Apples HyperCard. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 75-92). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Ballstaedt, S.-P., Mandl, H., Schnotz, W. & Tergan, S.-O. (1981). Texte verstehen, Texte gestalten. München: Urban & Schwarzenberg. Bannon, C.J. (1991). The Perseus project. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 480-487). New York: McGraw Hill. Bechtel, B.L. (1992). Inside Macintosh as hypertext. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 312-323). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung] Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Allison, L. & Hammond, N. (1989). A learning support environment: The hitch-hikers guide. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 62-74). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Baird, P., MacMorrow, N. & Hardman, L. (1988). Cognitive aspects of constructing nonlinear documents: HyperCard and Glasgow Online. In Proceedings of the 12th International Online Information Meeting, December 6-8, 1988, London (pp. 207-218). Baird, P. & Percival, M. (1989). Glasgow Online: Database development using Apples HyperCard. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 75-92). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Ballstaedt, S.-P., Mandl, H., Schnotz, W. & Tergan, S.-O. (1981). Texte verstehen, Texte gestalten. München: Urban & Schwarzenberg. Bannon, C.J. (1991). The Perseus project. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 480-487). New York: McGraw Hill. Bechtel, B.L. (1992). Inside Macintosh as hypertext. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 312-323). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung] Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Baird, P., MacMorrow, N. & Hardman, L. (1988). Cognitive aspects of constructing nonlinear documents: HyperCard and Glasgow Online. In Proceedings of the 12th International Online Information Meeting, December 6-8, 1988, London (pp. 207-218).
Baird, P. & Percival, M. (1989). Glasgow Online: Database development using Apples HyperCard. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 75-92). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Ballstaedt, S.-P., Mandl, H., Schnotz, W. & Tergan, S.-O. (1981). Texte verstehen, Texte gestalten. München: Urban & Schwarzenberg. Bannon, C.J. (1991). The Perseus project. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 480-487). New York: McGraw Hill. Bechtel, B.L. (1992). Inside Macintosh as hypertext. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 312-323). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung] Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Bannon, C.J. (1991). The Perseus project. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 480-487). New York: McGraw Hill.
Bechtel, B.L. (1992). Inside Macintosh as hypertext. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 312-323). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung] Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Beeman, W.O., Anderson, K.T., Bader, G., Larkin, J., McLard, A.P., McQuilan, P. & Shields, M. (1987). Hypertext and pluralism: From lineal to non-lineal thinking. In Proceedings of the 1st ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Chapel Hill, North Carolina, November 13-15, 1987 (pp. 67-88). New York: ACM. [Zusammenfassung]
Berk, E. & Devlin, J. (1991). A hypertext timeline. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 13-16). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Bernstein, M. (1991a). The navigation problem reconsidered. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 285-297). New York: McGraw Hill. Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Bernstein, M. (1991b). Storyspace: Hypertext and the process of writing. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 529-533). New York: McGraw Hill. Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Bertha, E. & Schwarz, E.J. (1991). Vom Prototyp zum Produkt. Empirische Untersuchung zum Akzeptanzverhalten einer Hypertextapplikation. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 52-62). Berlin: Springer. Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung] Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Blum-Weigeldt, A. (1996). Sofies Welt: Ein Experiment zum Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Unveröffentlichte Diplomarbeit, Universität Bonn, Bonn. [Zusammenfassung]
Bock, M. (1978). Wort-, Satz-, Textverarbeitung. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Bogaschewsky, R. (1992). Hypertext-/Hypermedia-Systeme - Ein Überblick. Informatik-Spektrum, 15, 127-143. Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Bui, K.P. (1989). HyperLexicon, a hypermedia-based lexicon for vocabulary acquisition. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 14-30). Berlin: Springer. Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Bush, V. (1945). As we may think. Atlantic Monthly, 1, 101-103. Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Carmel, E., Crawford, S. & Chen, H. (1992). Browsing in hypertext: A cognitive study. IEEE Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, 22, 865-884. Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Conklin, J. (1987). Hypertext: An introduction and survey. Computer Magazine, 20, 17-41. Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Cunningham, D.J., Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1993). The textbook of the future. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 19-50). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Dillon, A. (1992). Reading from paper versus screens: A critical review of the empirical literature. Ergonomics, 35, 1297-1326. Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Dillon, A., McKnight, C. & Richardson, J. (1993). Space - the final chapter or why physical representations are not semantic intentions. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 169-191). New York: Ellis Horwood. Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Dittrich, G. & Tochtermann, K. (1991). Browsing in unstrukturierten Hyperdokumenten. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 75-86). Berlin: Springer. Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Duffy, T.M. & Knuth, R.A. (1990). Hypermedia and instruction: Where is the match? In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 199-225). Berlin: Springer. Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Edwards, D.M. & Hardman, L. (1989). Lost in hyperspace: Cognitive mapping and navigation in a hypertext environment. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 105-125). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung]
Eherer, S., Jarke, M. & Hahn, U. (1990). Eine Software-Umgebung für die Erstellung von Hypermedia-Dokumenten durch Autorengruppen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia: Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 79-96). Berlin: Springer. Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Eickemeyer, K. (1992). Vom Buch zur Online-Hilfe, Links inklusive. Ein Prototyp mit gemeinsamer Text-Quelle für beide Medien. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 1-11). Berlin: Springer. Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Engelbart, D.C. (1963). A conceptual framework for the augmentation of man´s intellect. In P.W. Howerton & D.C. Weeks (Eds.), Vistas in information handling, Vol. 1 (pp. 1-29). Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Epstein, R.G. (1989). The information resource model. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 77-101). Berlin: Springer. Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Fiderio, J. (1988). A grand vision. Hypertext mimics the brain´s ability to access information quickly and intuitively by reference. BYTE, 13, 237-242. Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Foelsche, O. (1990). Hypertext/hypermedia-like environments and language learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 291-310). Berlin: Springer. Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Foss, C.L. (1989). Tools for reading and browsing hypertext. Information Processing and Management, 25, 407-418. Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gagné, R.M., Wagner, W. & Rojas, A. (1981). Planning and authoring computer-assisted lessons. Educational Technology, 21, 17-26. Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Garg, P.K. (1988). Abstraction mechanisms in hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 862-870. Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gay, G. (1986). Interaction of learner control and prior understanding in computer-assisted video instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78, 225-227. Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gay, G. (1991). Structuring interactive multimedia fiction. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 165-178). New York: McGraw Hill. Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gay, G. & Mazur, J. (1991). Navigating in hypermedia. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 271-283). New York: McGraw Hill. Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ] Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gerdes, H. (1997). Lernen mit Text und Hypertext. Lengerich: Pabst (Buchreihe Aktuelle Psychologische Forschung(APF), Band 18, herausgegeben von Axel Buchner und Joachim Funke ). [ Beschreibung der Untersuchung ]
Giellman, R. (1991). Rediscovering Pompeii. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/ hypermedia handbook (pp. 506-511). New York: McGraw Hill. Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Girill, T.R. & Luk, C.H. (1992). Hierarchical search support for hypertext on-line documentation. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 36, 571-585. Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gloor, P.A. (1990). Hypermedia-Anwendungsentwicklung: Eine Einführung mit HyperCard-Beispielen. Stuttgart: Teubner. Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gloor, P.A. (1991). Presenting hypermedia concepts using hypermedia techniques. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 109-118). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer. Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Fezzardi, G. & Häfele, G. (1993). The hypermedia system MEM and its application in evaluating learning and relearning in higher education. In G. Strube & K.F. Wender (Eds.), The cognitive psychology of knowledge (pp. 367-385). Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Glowalla, U., Hasebrook, J., Häfele, G., Fezzardi, G. & Rinck, M. (1992). Das gezielte Wiederlernen von Wissen mit Hilfe des Hypermedia-Systems MEM. In R. Cordes & N. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia 1992. Konzepte und Anwendungen auf dem Weg in die Praxis (S. 45-61). Berlin: Springer.
Glowalla, U., Rinck, M. & Fezzardi, G. (1993). Integration von Wissen über ein Sachgebiet. Zeitschrift für Pädagogische Psychologie, 7, 11-24. Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Gordon, S., Gustavel, J., Moore, J. & Hankey, J. (1988). The effects of hypertext on reader knowledge representation. In Proceedings of the Human Factors Society 32nd Annual Meeting (pp. 296-300). [Beschreibung der Untersuchung]
Gray, S.H. (1987). The effect of sequence control on computer assisted learning. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 14, 54-56. Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Groeben, N. (1982). Leserpsychologie: Textverständnis - Textverständlichkeit. Münster: Aschendorff. Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Haake, J. & Schütt, H. (1990). Eine Systemarchitektur für ein wissensbasiertes Hypertext-Autorensystem. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 65-78). Berlin: Springer. Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Halasz, F.G. (1988). Reflections on NoteCards: Seven issues for the next generation of hypermedia systems. Communications of the ACM, 31 [Special issue: Hypertext], 836-852. Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hammond, N. (1989). Hypermedia and learning: Who guides whom? In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 167-181). Berlin: Springer. Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hammond, N. (1993). Learning with hypertext: Problems, principles and prospects. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 51-70). New York: Ellis Horwood. Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hammwöhner, R. (1990). Macro-operations for hypertext construction. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 71-95). Berlin: Springer. Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hannemann, J., Thüring, M. & Haake, J. (1993). Hyperdocument presentation: Facing the interface. (Arbeitspapiere der Gesellschaft für Mathematik und Datenverarbeitung mbH, GMD, Nr. 784). Sankt Augustin: GMD. Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hardman, L. (1989). Evaluating the usability of the Glasgow Online hypertext. Hypermedia, 1, 34-63. Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension] Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hasebrook, J. (1995). Multimedia-Psychologie: Eine neue Perspektive menschlicher Kommunikation. Heidelberg: Spektrum. [Rezension]
Hazen, M. (1985). Instructional software design principles. Educational Technology, 25, 18-23. Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hellingrath, B., Kloth, M. & Tembrink, A. (1990). Hypermediale Schulungssoftware für die innerbetriebliche Standortplanung. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 263-267). Berlin: Springer. Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hewett, T.T. (1989). The Drexel disk: Hypertext-based instructional software as a tool for the exploration of a constrained knowledge space. Behavior Research Methods, Instruments, & Computers, 21, 316-325. Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hofmann, M. (1991). Hypertextsysteme - Begriffichkeit, Modelle, Problemstellungen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 177-185. Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Hooper, K. (1990). HyperCard: A key to educational computing. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 5-25). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Horn, R.E. (1989). Mapping hypertext. The analysis, organization, and display of knowledge for the next generation of on-line text and graphics. Waltham, MA: Information Mapping. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1990). Non-intrusive hypertext anchors and individual colour markings. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 261-273). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Irler, W.J. & Barbieri, G. (1991). Farbmarkierungen im Hypertext als Orientierungs- und Lernhilfe. In H. Maurer (Hrsg.), Hypertext/Hypermedia ´91 (S. 135-144). Berlin: Springer. Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Issing, L.J. (1988). Wissensvermittlung mit Medien. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 531-553). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. (1982). Programmed instruction revisited. In D.H. Jonassen (Ed.), The technology of text: Principles for structuring, designing, and displaying text (pp. 215-230). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. (1986). Hypertext principles for text and courseware design. Educational Psychologist, 21, 269-292. Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. (1988). Designing structured hypertext and structuring access to hypertext. Educational Technology, 28, 13-16. Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. (1989). Hypertext/Hypermedia. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publishers. Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. (1990). Semantic network elicitation: Tools for structuring hypertext. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 142-152). Oxford: Intellect. Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. (1991). Hypertext as instructional design. Educational Technology: Research and Development, 39, 83-92. Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. (1993). Effects of semantically structured hypertext knowledge bases on users knowledge structures. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 153-168). New York: Ellis Horwood. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung]
Jonassen, D.H. & Grabinger, R.S. (1990). Problems and issues in designing hypertext/ hypermedia for learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 3-25). Berlin: Springer. Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jonassen, D.H. & Wang, S. (1993). Acquiring structural knowledge from semantically structured hypertext. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 20, 1-8. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung]
Jonassen, D.H. & Mandl, H. (Eds.). (1990). Designing hypermedia for learning. Berlin: Springer. Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Jones, T. (1989). Incidental learning during information retrieval: A hypertext experiment. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 235-253). Berlin: Springer. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung]
Kintsch, W. (1988). The role of knowledge in discourse comprehension: A construction-integration model. Psychological Review, 95, 163-182. Kintsch, W. (1994). Text comprehension, memory, and learning. American Psychologist, 49, 294-303. Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Kintsch, W. & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Klimesch, W. (1988). Struktur und Aktivierung des Gedächtnisses. Das Vernetzungsmodell: Grundlagen und Elemente einer übergreifenden Theorie. Bern: Huber. Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Klix, F. & Krause, B. (1969). Zur Definition des Begriffs Struktur, seiner Eigenschaften und Darstellungsmöglichkeiten in der Experimentalpsychologie. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 176, 22-54. Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Klix, F., van der Meer, E., Preuß, M. & Wolf, M. (1987). Über Prozeß- und Strukturkomponenten der Wissensrepräsentation beim Menschen. Zeitschrift für Psychologie, 195, 39-61. Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Kluwe, R. (1979). Wissen und Denken. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Kluwe, R.H. (1988). Methoden der Psychologie zur Gewinnung von Daten über menschliches Wissen. In H. Spada & H. Mandl (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 359-385). München: Psychologie Verlags Union. Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Kreitzberg, C. (1989). Designing the electronic book: Human psychology and information structures for hypermedia. In G. Salvendy & M.J. Smith (Eds.), Designing and using human-computer interfaces and knowledge-based systems (pp. 457-464). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Kuhlen, R. (1991). Hypertext - Ein nicht-lineares Medium zwischen Buch und Wissensbank. Berlin: Springer. Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Kurland, D.M. & Kurland, L.C. (1987). Computer applications in education: A historical overview. Annual Review of Computer Science, 2, 317-358. Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Lachman, J.L. & Lachman, R. (1979). Theories of memory organization and human evolution. In C.R. Puff (Ed.), Memory organization and structure (pp. 133-193). New York: Academic Press. Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Landauer, T., Egan, D., Remde, J., Lesk, M., Lochbaum, C. & Ketchum, D. (1993). Enhancing the usability of text through computer delivery and formative evaluation: The SuperBook project. In C. McKnight, A. Dillon & J. Richardson (Eds.), Hypertext: A psychological perspective (pp. 71-136). New York: Ellis Horwood. Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Landow, G.P. (1990). Popular fallacies about hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 39-59). Berlin: Springer. Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Laurillard, D. (1987). Computers and the emancipation of students: Giving the control to the learner. Instructional Science, 16, 3-18. Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Leutner, D. (1992). Adaptive Lehrsysteme: Instruktionspsychologische Grundlagen und experimentelle Analysen. Weinheim: Psychologie Verlags Union. Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Lorch, R.F., Lorch, E.P. & Inman, W.E. (1993). Effects of signaling topic structure on text recall. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85, 281-290. Lovelace, E.A. & Southall, S.D. (1983). Memory for words in prose and their locations on the page. Memory and Cognition, 11, 429-434. Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Manes, S. (1987). Hypertext: A breath of air freshener. PC Magazine, 6, 91-95. Marchionini, G. (1989). Making the transition from print to electronic enceclopedias. Adaption of mental models. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 30, 591-618. Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Marchionini, G. (1990). Evaluating hypermedia-based learning. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 355-373). Berlin: Springer. Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34. Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Marchionini, G. & Crane, G. (1994). Evaluating Hypermedia and learning: Methods and results from the [Perseus] project. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 12, 5-34.
Marchionini, G. & Shneiderman, B. (1988). Finding facts vs. browsing in hypertext systems. IEEE Computer, 21, 70-80. Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Mayes, T., Kibby, M. & Anderson, T. (1990). Learning about learning from hypertext. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 227-250). Berlin: Springer. McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
McAleese, R. (1989). Navigation and browsing in hypertext. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 6-44). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (1990). A comparison of linear and hypertext formats in information retrieval. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 10-19). Oxford: Intellect. McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
McKnight, C., Dillon, A. & Richardson, J. (Eds.). (1993). Hypertext: A psychological perspective. New York: Ellis Horwood. Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Mohageg, M.F. (1992). The influence of hypertext linking structures on the efficiency of information retrieval. Human Factors, 34, 351-367. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung]
Monk, A., Walsh, P. & Dix, A. (1988). A comparison of hypertext, scrolling, and folding as mechanisms for program browsing. In D. Jones & R. Winder (Eds.), People and computers IV (pp. 421-436). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Mylonas, E. & Heath, S. (1992). Hypertext from the data point of view: Paths and links in the [Perseus] project. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 324-336). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Nielsen, J. (1989). The matters that really matter for hypertext usability. In Proceedings of the ACM Conference on Hypertext (Hypertext ´87), Pittsburgh, Penn., November 5-8, 1989 (pp. 239-248). Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Nielsen, J. (1990a). The art of navigating through hypertext. Communications of the ACM, 33, 296-310. Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Nielsen, J. (1990b). Hypertext and hypermedia. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. Nielsen, J. & Lyngbæk, U. (1990). Two field studies of hypermedia usability. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 64-72). Oxford: Intellect. Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Norman, D. (1973). Memory, knowledge, and the answering of questions. In R.L. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 135-165). New York: Wiley. Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Oborne, D.J. (1990). Browsing and navigation through hypertext documents: A review of the human-computer interface issues. Interactive Multimedia, 1, 23-32. Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Osborn, H. (1990). Media computers, motivation, and informal education: Gutenberg 2000? In S. Ambron & K. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 357-381). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Parunak, H.V.D. (1991). Ordering the information graph. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 299-325). New York: McGraw Hill. Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Perez, E. (1991). Tools for authoring hypertexts. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 209-224). New York: McGraw Hill. Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Pfeiffer, H. & Eberleh, E. (1991). Mental spaces of hypertext links: An empirical investigation. In H.J. Bullinger (Ed.), Human aspects in computing. Design and use of interactive systems and work with terminals. (pp. 322-326). Amsterdam: Elsevier. Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Plaisant, C. (1991). Guide to opportunities in volunteer archaelogy: Case study on the use of a hypertext system in a museum exhibit. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 498-505). New York: McGraw Hill. Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Richartz, M. & Schaper, J. (1990). Das Projekt NESTOR. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 253-257). Berlin: Springer. Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Rouet, J.F. (1992). Interactive text processing by inexperienced (hyper-) readers. In R. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Systems, concepts, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 250-260). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Russell, D.M. (1990). Alexandria: A learning resources management architecture. In D.H. Jonassen & H. Mandl (Eds.), Designing hypermedia for learning (pp. 439-457). Berlin: Springer. Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung] Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Samarapungavan, A. & Beishuizen, J. (1992). Hypermedia and kowledge acquisition from non-linear expository text. In B.v. Hout-Wolters & W. Schnotz (Eds.), Text comprehension and learning from text (pp. 53-69). Amsterdam: Swets & Zeitlinger. [Beschreibung der Untersuchung]
Sarre, F. & Güntzer, U. (1990). Einsatz des Hypertextsystems "HyperMan" für Online-Datenbankmanuale. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 112-123). Berlin: Springer. Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Saxer, K.-H. & Gloor, P.A. (1990). Navigation im Hyperraum: Fisheye Views in HyperCard. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 190-204). Berlin: Springer. Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Schnotz, W. (1988). Textverstehen als Aufbau mentaler Modelle. In H. Mandl & H. Spada (Hrsg.), Wissenspsychologie (S. 299-330). München: Psychologie-Verlags-Union. Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Schnotz, W. (1994). Strategy-specific information access in knowledge acquisition from hypertext (Research Report No. 2). Jena, Germany: Friedrich-Schiller-University of Jena, Institute of Psychology, Department of Educational Psychology. Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Schnupp, P. (1992). Hypertext. München: Oldenbourg. Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Schuler, W. & Smith, J. (1992). Author´s Argumentation Assistant (AAA): A hypertext-based authoring tool for argumentative texts. In A. Rizk, N. Streitz & J. André (Eds.), Hypertext: Concepts, systems, and applications. Proceedings of the European Conference on Hypertext, INRIA, France, November 1990 (pp. 137-151). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Semper, R. (1990). HyperCard and education: Reflections on the HyperBoom. In K. Ambron & S. Hooper (Eds.), Learning with interactive multimedia: Developing and using multimedia tools in education (pp. 51-67). Redmond, WA: Microsoft Press. Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Shneiderman, B., Kreitzberg, C. & Berk, E. (1991). Editing to structure a readers experience. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 143-164). New York: McGraw Hill. Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Simon, L. (1991). Erfahrungen und Methoden zur Entwicklung von Hypertextapplikationen. Wirtschaftsinformatik, 3, 186-197. Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Simpson, A. & McKnight, C. (1990). Navigation in hypertext: Structural cues and mental maps. In R. McAleese & C. Green (Eds.), Hypertext: State of the art (pp. 73-83). Oxford: Intellect. Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Slatin, J.M. (1991). Composing hypertext: A discussion for writing teachers. In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 55-64). New York: McGraw Hill. Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Sowinski, B. (1983). Textlinguistik. Stuttgart: Kohlhammer. Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Spiro, R.J., Feltovich, R.L., Jacobson, M.J. & Coulson, R.L. (1991). Cognitive flexibility, constructivism, and hypertext. Random access instruction for advanced knowledge acquisition in ill-structured domains. Educational Technology, 31, 24-33. Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Spiro, R.J. & Jehng, J.C. (1990). Cognitive flexibility and hypertext. Theory and technology for the nonlinear and multidimensional traversal of complex subject matter. In D. Nix & R.J. Spiro (Eds.), Cognition, education, and multimedia. Exploring ideas in high technology (pp. 163-205). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Streitz, N.A. (1990). Hypertext: Ein innovatives Medium zur Kommunikation von Wissen. In P.A. Gloor & N.A. Streitz (Hrsg.), Hypertext und Hypermedia. Von theoretischen Konzepten zur praktischen Anwendung (S. 10-27). Berlin: Springer. Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Stubenrauch, R. (1989). Touring a hyper-CAI system. In H. Maurer (Ed.), Computer assisted learning (pp. 541-551). Berlin: Springer. Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Thomas, B. (1991). If monks had Macs... In E. Berk & J. Devlin (Eds.), Hypertext/hypermedia handbook (pp. 519-523). New York: McGraw Hill. Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Thome, R. (1991). Hypermedia - Lehrer Lämpels Nachfolger? Wirtschaftsinformatik, 33, 207-212. Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Trigg, R.H. & Suchman, L.A. (1989). Collaborative writing in NoteCards. In R. McAleese (Ed.), Hypertext: Theory into practice (pp. 45-61). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Tripp, S.D. & Roby, W. (1990). Orientation and disorientation in a hypertext lexicon. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 17, 120-124. Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
Utting, K. & Yankelovich, N. (1989). Context and orientation in hypermedia networks. ACM Transactions on Information Systems, 7, 58-84. van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.
van Dijk, T.A. & Kintsch, W. (1983). Strategies of discourse comprehension. New York: Academic Press.